<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Millingm</id>
	<title>William Paterson University - Information Technology&#039;s Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Millingm"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php/Special:Contributions/Millingm"/>
	<updated>2026-04-29T00:53:31Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12426</id>
		<title>Phone and Voicemail System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12426"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:47:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF8C00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This article provides information on utilizing Cisco Webex Calling and Voicemail.  If you are looking for instructions for [[Voicemail|the existing Avaya Voicemail system please see our previous  documentation.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information Technology is responsible for the design implementation and management of the University’s voice systems consisting of the Cisco Webex Calling, end user instruments and supporting peripherals, inclusive of messaging, call and invoice management systems, automated operator and directory services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Here are some helpful links with detailed instructions pertaining to the Phone and Voicemail System:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Webex? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Webex is Cisco’s video and phone conferencing platform.  It allows individuals to make, receive, and schedule phone calls, video calls, and conferences from any device.  Webex meetings are highly immersive, providing HD video, wireless content sharing and much more. Webex Meetings and Events can have up to 1000 participants. Webex meeting would be more collaborative whereas Webex events are more ideal for presentations and a larger audience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changes to Webex - 2021 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important information about changes to Webex at WPUNJ:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A Unified WebEx App&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By years end, the current WebEx Teams app and WebEx Meetings app will be fully replaced by a single app simply called WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For now, WebEx Meetings will stay in place and anyone with Web Teams should automatically be upgraded to WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;WebEx Calling in Trial&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We are  currently testing WebEx calling in limited trial testing.   WebEx calling turns the WebEx application into a fully featured phone experience, using your WPU extension either on or off campus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For specific information about the calling testing, or if you have questions and concerns, please contact the [https://help.wpunj.edu/ HelpDesk].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using the Webex App (Desktop) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Installation ===&lt;br /&gt;
The full application is available through the [https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php/University_Software Software Center] on University imaged machines. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
For personal machines, go to https://www.webex.com/downloads.html to install full application for your platform.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After installing, you will need to sign in to the application:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Sign in&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your &#039;&#039;&#039;full WPU email address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Sign in again with &#039;&#039;&#039;WPU login&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duo authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon initial login, you may encounter ‘Phone service disconnected’ message – to resolve click the message, then click ‘New Session’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call error3.png|350px|frame|none|service disconnected error]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interface Overview ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebexUI 1.png|750px|none|Webex App User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;On Windows and Mac, you&#039;ll see Help  at the bottom of your spaces list, which links you to Cisco help documentation.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Your group work takes place in spaces, either in groups or in direct messages with another person. They display prominently so you can get to them whenever you need to. Your most recently active spaces are at the top. If anyone has added you to a new team or space, you&#039;ll see it here too. When someone&#039;s posted a new message in the space, you&#039;ll see the bolded space name.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation Menu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Switch easily among your message, team, call, and meeting views. Messages appear by default, but your teams, calls, and meetings are just a click away. When you have unread messages in your spaces or teams, you&#039;ll see counters next to Messaging  and Teams .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Profile and Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click your profile to update your picture or name, access your settings and preferences, and set your availability. If you have some important work to finish or are on a call, let people know that you don&#039;t want to be disturbed: whether that&#039;s for a few minutes or an entire day is up to you.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click Set a status , select a status from the list or create and share any status you want, so your colleagues know what you&#039;re up to.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, just click  Search, meet, and call to search through the history of your conversations to find people you&#039;re talking to, spaces you&#039;re in, messages you received, and files you need.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filters&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click  to see the available filters. Then, select a filter to show just the messages or spaces you want to see.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Start a Conversation, Make a Call, or Add a Contact&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, click , and select Send a direct message to create a direct message space between you and just one other person, or select Create a Space to start a group conversation. You can also select Make a call , or select Add a contact.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Devices&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header on Windows and Mac, you can connect automatically with Webex devices from the Connect to a Device menu. When connected, you can share your screen, start a call, or open a space (on Webex Board). You can also connect to your desk phone from the menu to make calls and join meetings. If you have a lot of devices close by, you can set certain devices to not automatically connect.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Whenever you&#039;re in a space, click the activity menu tabs to get access to all the different activities you can do:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Messages&#039;&#039; — Messages are where you chat with colleagues. We keep these messages secure so you can feel confident sharing your work ideas in Webex.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;People&#039;&#039; — see who&#039;s in the space, or if you&#039;re a moderator you can add people to the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039; — find and see all your shared files, photos, links and whiteboard content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Schedule&#039;&#039; — create a meeting from the space or get a list of meetings already scheduled for the space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Call/Meet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Audio&#039;&#039; — make an audio call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Video&#039;&#039; — make a video call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Application Update Available&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Update-Icon.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex App will periodically prompt for an update by showing an icon in the sidebar. Click the green circle icon to relaunch Webex and install the newest application version.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio Calling ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Telephone  Phone --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Place an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
To place an audio call, navigate to the &#039;&#039;&#039;calling tab&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-calltab.png|500px|none|webex app - calling tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
From here you can dial a number or search directory to make call.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can view your call history in the left pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Answer an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving a call, you will receive a desktop notification in the lower right hand corner of the screen with buttons that give you options to answer, decline, or send a message to the caller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Incomingnotif.png|400px|none|Webex App - Incoming Call]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application will also ring. Ring settings can be adjusted under Audio Preferences, located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Audio.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Ringer-Settings.png|400px|none|Webex App - Ringer Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are looking to purchase a headset, we suggest the Poly Plantronics Blackwire 3225 USB-C as a reliable device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
To view and manage call settings, click on “Call Settings” bottom left of UI, dialog box will open (see below).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-CallSettings.png|500px|none|Webex App - Quick Call Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helpful settings available here include: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Forward Calls to Voicemail or another registered number (see next section on adding numbers) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a registered phone for “Single Number Reach” - this will allow incoming calls to ring on both your desktop app and the selected phone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Preferences ====&lt;br /&gt;
Call preferences can be located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Calling&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call pref2.png|400px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to start calls with your video enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to forward calls to VM or another number, add forwarding numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add phone number for Single Number Reach, and enable/disable for numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Voicemail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting Voicemail Pin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A voicemail pin will be required to access voicemail and change voicemail settings. This process is also to be used if user forgets or is locked out of their voicemail. The pin &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be set by the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) Go to website: www.settings.webex.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP1.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Select Settings&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) Select Calling&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Select Voicemail&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Select Reset Voicemail Pin&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Follow the directions in the box. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
Some voicemail settings are only available through the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; section of the Settings Portal. This portal can be accessed here: https://settings.webex.com by signing in with you University credentials, then following the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; link from the top menu (this will open a new page). On this page click &#039;Voicemail Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default voicemail settings are as follows. These settings can be changed if desired:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When busy, send calls to voicemail.&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer after 3 rings.&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:CiscoWebex-DefaultVMSettings.png|550px|frame|none|Default Voicemail Settings]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Additional Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail to Email&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice messages sent to email by entering their email address in the Settings Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail Text Notification&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice message notifications sent by text by entering their phone number and selecting their provider in the Settings Portal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-VMtoEmail.png|500px|frame|none|Voicemail to Email and Text Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information on voicemail settings see [https://callinghelp.webex.com/eu_voicemail/ Voicemail Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Phone Access - Voice Portal ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voicemail can be access through the Voice Portal by dialing: 973-720-3451. You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* Mailbox ID (last 4 digits of extension and # symbol)&lt;br /&gt;
* Voicemail Pin and # symbol (set through the web portal, see Setting Voicemail Pin section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Greetings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|unEXDB05xBU|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to record your personalized name and No Answer greeting through the Voice Portal. Below is the phone menu tree for reference:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Menu-Tree.png|700px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Webex Mobile Apps ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installing the Webex Mobile App allows for your mobile device to be notified when someone calls you through Webex. Calls made to Webex extensions will ring the Webex App and notify you with a &amp;quot;ring&amp;quot; that can be answered on your device. The Webex App also allows you to place calls from your mobile device and can be downloaded from either the Apple App Store or Google Play Store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== iOS ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/cisco-webex/id833967564 Apple App Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AppleApp.PNG|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.cisco.wx2.android Google Play Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AndroidApp.jpg|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|LxZzrSEBKYs|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cisco Phone ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cisco 8841 Guide Page 3.jpg|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Webex#Cisco_8841_Office_Phone_Overview|Please visit the Cisco 8841 Phone Overview section for more information about the Cisco 8841 Phones as well as a PDF with additional information]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12425</id>
		<title>Phone and Voicemail System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12425"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:46:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF8C00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This article provides information on utilizing Cisco Webex Calling and Voicemail.  If you are looking for instructions for [[Voicemail|the existing Avaya Voicemail system please see our previous  documentation.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information Technology is responsible for the design implementation and management of the University’s voice systems consisting of the Cisco Webex Calling, end user instruments and supporting peripherals, inclusive of messaging, call and invoice management systems, automated operator and directory services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Here are some helpful links with detailed instructions pertaining to the Phone and Voicemail System:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Webex? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Webex is Cisco’s video and phone conferencing platform.  It allows individuals to make, receive, and schedule phone calls, video calls, and conferences from any device.  Webex meetings are highly immersive, providing HD video, wireless content sharing and much more. Webex Meetings and Events can have up to 1000 participants. Webex meeting would be more collaborative whereas Webex events are more ideal for presentations and a larger audience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changes to Webex - 2021 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important information about changes to Webex at WPUNJ:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A Unified WebEx App&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By years end, the current WebEx Teams app and WebEx Meetings app will be fully replaced by a single app simply called WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For now, WebEx Meetings will stay in place and anyone with Web Teams should automatically be upgraded to WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;WebEx Calling in Trial&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We are  currently testing WebEx calling in limited trial testing.   WebEx calling turns the WebEx application into a fully featured phone experience, using your WPU extension either on or off campus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For specific information about the calling testing, or if you have questions and concerns, please contact the [https://help.wpunj.edu/ HelpDesk].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using the Webex App (Desktop) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Installation ===&lt;br /&gt;
The full application is available through the [https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php/University_Software Software Center] on University imaged machines. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
For personal machines, go to https://www.webex.com/downloads.html to install full application for your platform.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After installing, you will need to sign in to the application:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Sign in&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your &#039;&#039;&#039;full WPU email address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Sign in again with &#039;&#039;&#039;WPU login&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duo authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon initial login, you may encounter ‘Phone service disconnected’ message – to resolve click the message, then click ‘New Session’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call error3.png|350px|frame|none|service disconnected error]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interface Overview ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebexUI 1.png|750px|none|Webex App User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;On Windows and Mac, you&#039;ll see Help  at the bottom of your spaces list, which links you to Cisco help documentation.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Your group work takes place in spaces, either in groups or in direct messages with another person. They display prominently so you can get to them whenever you need to. Your most recently active spaces are at the top. If anyone has added you to a new team or space, you&#039;ll see it here too. When someone&#039;s posted a new message in the space, you&#039;ll see the bolded space name.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation Menu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Switch easily among your message, team, call, and meeting views. Messages appear by default, but your teams, calls, and meetings are just a click away. When you have unread messages in your spaces or teams, you&#039;ll see counters next to Messaging  and Teams .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Profile and Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click your profile to update your picture or name, access your settings and preferences, and set your availability. If you have some important work to finish or are on a call, let people know that you don&#039;t want to be disturbed: whether that&#039;s for a few minutes or an entire day is up to you.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click Set a status , select a status from the list or create and share any status you want, so your colleagues know what you&#039;re up to.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, just click  Search, meet, and call to search through the history of your conversations to find people you&#039;re talking to, spaces you&#039;re in, messages you received, and files you need.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filters&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click  to see the available filters. Then, select a filter to show just the messages or spaces you want to see.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Start a Conversation, Make a Call, or Add a Contact&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, click , and select Send a direct message to create a direct message space between you and just one other person, or select Create a Space to start a group conversation. You can also select Make a call , or select Add a contact.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Devices&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header on Windows and Mac, you can connect automatically with Webex devices from the Connect to a Device menu. When connected, you can share your screen, start a call, or open a space (on Webex Board). You can also connect to your desk phone from the menu to make calls and join meetings. If you have a lot of devices close by, you can set certain devices to not automatically connect.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Whenever you&#039;re in a space, click the activity menu tabs to get access to all the different activities you can do:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Messages&#039;&#039; — Messages are where you chat with colleagues. We keep these messages secure so you can feel confident sharing your work ideas in Webex.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;People&#039;&#039; — see who&#039;s in the space, or if you&#039;re a moderator you can add people to the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039; — find and see all your shared files, photos, links and whiteboard content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Schedule&#039;&#039; — create a meeting from the space or get a list of meetings already scheduled for the space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Call/Meet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Audio&#039;&#039; — make an audio call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Video&#039;&#039; — make a video call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Application Update Available&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Update-Icon.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex App will periodically prompt for an update by showing an icon in the sidebar. Click the green circle icon to relaunch Webex and install the newest application version.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio Calling ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Telephone  Phone --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Place an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
To place an audio call, navigate to the &#039;&#039;&#039;calling tab&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-calltab.png|500px|none|webex app - calling tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
From here you can dial a number or search directory to make call.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can view your call history in the left pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Answer an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving a call, you will receive a desktop notification in the lower right hand corner of the screen with buttons that give you options to answer, decline, or send a message to the caller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Incomingnotif.png|400px|none|Webex App - Incoming Call]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application will also ring. Ring settings can be adjusted under Audio Preferences, located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Audio.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Ringer-Settings.png|400px|none|Webex App - Ringer Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are looking to purchase a headset, we suggest the Poly Plantronics Blackwire 3225 USB-C as a reliable device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
To view and manage call settings, click on “Call Settings” bottom left of UI, dialog box will open (see below).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-CallSettings.png|500px|none|Webex App - Quick Call Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helpful settings available here include: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Forward Calls to Voicemail or another registered number (see next section on adding numbers) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a registered phone for “Single Number Reach” - this will allow incoming calls to ring on both your desktop app and the selected phone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Preferences ====&lt;br /&gt;
Call preferences can be located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Calling&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call pref2.png|400px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to start calls with your video enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to forward calls to VM or another number, add forwarding numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add phone number for Single Number Reach, and enable/disable for numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Voicemail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting Voicemail Pin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A voicemail pin will be required to access voicemail and change voicemail settings. This process is also to be used if user forgets or is locked out of their voicemail. The pin &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be set by the user. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) Go to website: www.settings.webex.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP1.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) Select Settings&lt;br /&gt;
3.) Select Calling&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Select Voicemail&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Select Reset Voicemail Pin&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Follow the directions in the box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
Some voicemail settings are only available through the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; section of the Settings Portal. This portal can be accessed here: https://settings.webex.com by signing in with you University credentials, then following the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; link from the top menu (this will open a new page). On this page click &#039;Voicemail Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default voicemail settings are as follows. These settings can be changed if desired:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When busy, send calls to voicemail.&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer after 3 rings.&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:CiscoWebex-DefaultVMSettings.png|550px|frame|none|Default Voicemail Settings]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Additional Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail to Email&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice messages sent to email by entering their email address in the Settings Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail Text Notification&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice message notifications sent by text by entering their phone number and selecting their provider in the Settings Portal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-VMtoEmail.png|500px|frame|none|Voicemail to Email and Text Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information on voicemail settings see [https://callinghelp.webex.com/eu_voicemail/ Voicemail Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Phone Access - Voice Portal ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voicemail can be access through the Voice Portal by dialing: 973-720-3451. You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* Mailbox ID (last 4 digits of extension and # symbol)&lt;br /&gt;
* Voicemail Pin and # symbol (set through the web portal, see Setting Voicemail Pin section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Greetings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|unEXDB05xBU|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to record your personalized name and No Answer greeting through the Voice Portal. Below is the phone menu tree for reference:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Menu-Tree.png|700px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Webex Mobile Apps ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installing the Webex Mobile App allows for your mobile device to be notified when someone calls you through Webex. Calls made to Webex extensions will ring the Webex App and notify you with a &amp;quot;ring&amp;quot; that can be answered on your device. The Webex App also allows you to place calls from your mobile device and can be downloaded from either the Apple App Store or Google Play Store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== iOS ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/cisco-webex/id833967564 Apple App Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AppleApp.PNG|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.cisco.wx2.android Google Play Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AndroidApp.jpg|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|LxZzrSEBKYs|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cisco Phone ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cisco 8841 Guide Page 3.jpg|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Webex#Cisco_8841_Office_Phone_Overview|Please visit the Cisco 8841 Phone Overview section for more information about the Cisco 8841 Phones as well as a PDF with additional information]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12424</id>
		<title>Phone and Voicemail System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12424"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:42:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF8C00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This article provides information on utilizing Cisco Webex Calling and Voicemail.  If you are looking for instructions for [[Voicemail|the existing Avaya Voicemail system please see our previous  documentation.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information Technology is responsible for the design implementation and management of the University’s voice systems consisting of the Cisco Webex Calling, end user instruments and supporting peripherals, inclusive of messaging, call and invoice management systems, automated operator and directory services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Here are some helpful links with detailed instructions pertaining to the Phone and Voicemail System:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Webex? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Webex is Cisco’s video and phone conferencing platform.  It allows individuals to make, receive, and schedule phone calls, video calls, and conferences from any device.  Webex meetings are highly immersive, providing HD video, wireless content sharing and much more. Webex Meetings and Events can have up to 1000 participants. Webex meeting would be more collaborative whereas Webex events are more ideal for presentations and a larger audience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changes to Webex - 2021 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important information about changes to Webex at WPUNJ:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A Unified WebEx App&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By years end, the current WebEx Teams app and WebEx Meetings app will be fully replaced by a single app simply called WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For now, WebEx Meetings will stay in place and anyone with Web Teams should automatically be upgraded to WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;WebEx Calling in Trial&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We are  currently testing WebEx calling in limited trial testing.   WebEx calling turns the WebEx application into a fully featured phone experience, using your WPU extension either on or off campus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For specific information about the calling testing, or if you have questions and concerns, please contact the [https://help.wpunj.edu/ HelpDesk].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using the Webex App (Desktop) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Installation ===&lt;br /&gt;
The full application is available through the [https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php/University_Software Software Center] on University imaged machines. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
For personal machines, go to https://www.webex.com/downloads.html to install full application for your platform.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After installing, you will need to sign in to the application:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Sign in&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your &#039;&#039;&#039;full WPU email address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Sign in again with &#039;&#039;&#039;WPU login&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duo authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon initial login, you may encounter ‘Phone service disconnected’ message – to resolve click the message, then click ‘New Session’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call error3.png|350px|frame|none|service disconnected error]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interface Overview ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebexUI 1.png|750px|none|Webex App User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;On Windows and Mac, you&#039;ll see Help  at the bottom of your spaces list, which links you to Cisco help documentation.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Your group work takes place in spaces, either in groups or in direct messages with another person. They display prominently so you can get to them whenever you need to. Your most recently active spaces are at the top. If anyone has added you to a new team or space, you&#039;ll see it here too. When someone&#039;s posted a new message in the space, you&#039;ll see the bolded space name.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation Menu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Switch easily among your message, team, call, and meeting views. Messages appear by default, but your teams, calls, and meetings are just a click away. When you have unread messages in your spaces or teams, you&#039;ll see counters next to Messaging  and Teams .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Profile and Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click your profile to update your picture or name, access your settings and preferences, and set your availability. If you have some important work to finish or are on a call, let people know that you don&#039;t want to be disturbed: whether that&#039;s for a few minutes or an entire day is up to you.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click Set a status , select a status from the list or create and share any status you want, so your colleagues know what you&#039;re up to.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, just click  Search, meet, and call to search through the history of your conversations to find people you&#039;re talking to, spaces you&#039;re in, messages you received, and files you need.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filters&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click  to see the available filters. Then, select a filter to show just the messages or spaces you want to see.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Start a Conversation, Make a Call, or Add a Contact&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, click , and select Send a direct message to create a direct message space between you and just one other person, or select Create a Space to start a group conversation. You can also select Make a call , or select Add a contact.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Devices&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header on Windows and Mac, you can connect automatically with Webex devices from the Connect to a Device menu. When connected, you can share your screen, start a call, or open a space (on Webex Board). You can also connect to your desk phone from the menu to make calls and join meetings. If you have a lot of devices close by, you can set certain devices to not automatically connect.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Whenever you&#039;re in a space, click the activity menu tabs to get access to all the different activities you can do:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Messages&#039;&#039; — Messages are where you chat with colleagues. We keep these messages secure so you can feel confident sharing your work ideas in Webex.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;People&#039;&#039; — see who&#039;s in the space, or if you&#039;re a moderator you can add people to the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039; — find and see all your shared files, photos, links and whiteboard content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Schedule&#039;&#039; — create a meeting from the space or get a list of meetings already scheduled for the space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Call/Meet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Audio&#039;&#039; — make an audio call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Video&#039;&#039; — make a video call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Application Update Available&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Update-Icon.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex App will periodically prompt for an update by showing an icon in the sidebar. Click the green circle icon to relaunch Webex and install the newest application version.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio Calling ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Telephone  Phone --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Place an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
To place an audio call, navigate to the &#039;&#039;&#039;calling tab&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-calltab.png|500px|none|webex app - calling tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
From here you can dial a number or search directory to make call.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can view your call history in the left pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Answer an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving a call, you will receive a desktop notification in the lower right hand corner of the screen with buttons that give you options to answer, decline, or send a message to the caller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Incomingnotif.png|400px|none|Webex App - Incoming Call]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application will also ring. Ring settings can be adjusted under Audio Preferences, located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Audio.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Ringer-Settings.png|400px|none|Webex App - Ringer Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are looking to purchase a headset, we suggest the Poly Plantronics Blackwire 3225 USB-C as a reliable device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
To view and manage call settings, click on “Call Settings” bottom left of UI, dialog box will open (see below).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-CallSettings.png|500px|none|Webex App - Quick Call Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helpful settings available here include: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Forward Calls to Voicemail or another registered number (see next section on adding numbers) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a registered phone for “Single Number Reach” - this will allow incoming calls to ring on both your desktop app and the selected phone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Preferences ====&lt;br /&gt;
Call preferences can be located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Calling&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call pref2.png|400px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to start calls with your video enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to forward calls to VM or another number, add forwarding numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add phone number for Single Number Reach, and enable/disable for numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Voicemail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting Voicemail Pin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A voicemail pin will be required to access voicemail and change voicemail settings. This process is also to be used if user forgets or is locked out of their voicemail. The pin &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be set by the user. To set your voicemail pin:&lt;br /&gt;
Go to website: www.settings.webex.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP1.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
Some voicemail settings are only available through the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; section of the Settings Portal. This portal can be accessed here: https://settings.webex.com by signing in with you University credentials, then following the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; link from the top menu (this will open a new page). On this page click &#039;Voicemail Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default voicemail settings are as follows. These settings can be changed if desired:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When busy, send calls to voicemail.&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer after 3 rings.&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:CiscoWebex-DefaultVMSettings.png|550px|frame|none|Default Voicemail Settings]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Additional Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail to Email&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice messages sent to email by entering their email address in the Settings Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail Text Notification&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice message notifications sent by text by entering their phone number and selecting their provider in the Settings Portal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-VMtoEmail.png|500px|frame|none|Voicemail to Email and Text Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information on voicemail settings see [https://callinghelp.webex.com/eu_voicemail/ Voicemail Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Phone Access - Voice Portal ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voicemail can be access through the Voice Portal by dialing: 973-720-3451. You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* Mailbox ID (last 4 digits of extension and # symbol)&lt;br /&gt;
* Voicemail Pin and # symbol (set through the web portal, see Setting Voicemail Pin section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Greetings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|unEXDB05xBU|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to record your personalized name and No Answer greeting through the Voice Portal. Below is the phone menu tree for reference:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Menu-Tree.png|700px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Webex Mobile Apps ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installing the Webex Mobile App allows for your mobile device to be notified when someone calls you through Webex. Calls made to Webex extensions will ring the Webex App and notify you with a &amp;quot;ring&amp;quot; that can be answered on your device. The Webex App also allows you to place calls from your mobile device and can be downloaded from either the Apple App Store or Google Play Store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== iOS ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/cisco-webex/id833967564 Apple App Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AppleApp.PNG|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.cisco.wx2.android Google Play Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AndroidApp.jpg|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|LxZzrSEBKYs|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cisco Phone ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cisco 8841 Guide Page 3.jpg|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Webex#Cisco_8841_Office_Phone_Overview|Please visit the Cisco 8841 Phone Overview section for more information about the Cisco 8841 Phones as well as a PDF with additional information]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12423</id>
		<title>Phone and Voicemail System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12423"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:39:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF8C00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This article provides information on utilizing Cisco Webex Calling and Voicemail.  If you are looking for instructions for [[Voicemail|the existing Avaya Voicemail system please see our previous  documentation.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information Technology is responsible for the design implementation and management of the University’s voice systems consisting of the Cisco Webex Calling, end user instruments and supporting peripherals, inclusive of messaging, call and invoice management systems, automated operator and directory services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Here are some helpful links with detailed instructions pertaining to the Phone and Voicemail System:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Webex? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Webex is Cisco’s video and phone conferencing platform.  It allows individuals to make, receive, and schedule phone calls, video calls, and conferences from any device.  Webex meetings are highly immersive, providing HD video, wireless content sharing and much more. Webex Meetings and Events can have up to 1000 participants. Webex meeting would be more collaborative whereas Webex events are more ideal for presentations and a larger audience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changes to Webex - 2021 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important information about changes to Webex at WPUNJ:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A Unified WebEx App&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By years end, the current WebEx Teams app and WebEx Meetings app will be fully replaced by a single app simply called WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For now, WebEx Meetings will stay in place and anyone with Web Teams should automatically be upgraded to WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;WebEx Calling in Trial&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We are  currently testing WebEx calling in limited trial testing.   WebEx calling turns the WebEx application into a fully featured phone experience, using your WPU extension either on or off campus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For specific information about the calling testing, or if you have questions and concerns, please contact the [https://help.wpunj.edu/ HelpDesk].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using the Webex App (Desktop) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Installation ===&lt;br /&gt;
The full application is available through the [https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php/University_Software Software Center] on University imaged machines. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
For personal machines, go to https://www.webex.com/downloads.html to install full application for your platform.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After installing, you will need to sign in to the application:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Sign in&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your &#039;&#039;&#039;full WPU email address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Sign in again with &#039;&#039;&#039;WPU login&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duo authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon initial login, you may encounter ‘Phone service disconnected’ message – to resolve click the message, then click ‘New Session’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call error3.png|350px|frame|none|service disconnected error]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interface Overview ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebexUI 1.png|750px|none|Webex App User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;On Windows and Mac, you&#039;ll see Help  at the bottom of your spaces list, which links you to Cisco help documentation.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Your group work takes place in spaces, either in groups or in direct messages with another person. They display prominently so you can get to them whenever you need to. Your most recently active spaces are at the top. If anyone has added you to a new team or space, you&#039;ll see it here too. When someone&#039;s posted a new message in the space, you&#039;ll see the bolded space name.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation Menu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Switch easily among your message, team, call, and meeting views. Messages appear by default, but your teams, calls, and meetings are just a click away. When you have unread messages in your spaces or teams, you&#039;ll see counters next to Messaging  and Teams .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Profile and Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click your profile to update your picture or name, access your settings and preferences, and set your availability. If you have some important work to finish or are on a call, let people know that you don&#039;t want to be disturbed: whether that&#039;s for a few minutes or an entire day is up to you.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click Set a status , select a status from the list or create and share any status you want, so your colleagues know what you&#039;re up to.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, just click  Search, meet, and call to search through the history of your conversations to find people you&#039;re talking to, spaces you&#039;re in, messages you received, and files you need.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filters&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click  to see the available filters. Then, select a filter to show just the messages or spaces you want to see.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Start a Conversation, Make a Call, or Add a Contact&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, click , and select Send a direct message to create a direct message space between you and just one other person, or select Create a Space to start a group conversation. You can also select Make a call , or select Add a contact.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Devices&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header on Windows and Mac, you can connect automatically with Webex devices from the Connect to a Device menu. When connected, you can share your screen, start a call, or open a space (on Webex Board). You can also connect to your desk phone from the menu to make calls and join meetings. If you have a lot of devices close by, you can set certain devices to not automatically connect.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Whenever you&#039;re in a space, click the activity menu tabs to get access to all the different activities you can do:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Messages&#039;&#039; — Messages are where you chat with colleagues. We keep these messages secure so you can feel confident sharing your work ideas in Webex.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;People&#039;&#039; — see who&#039;s in the space, or if you&#039;re a moderator you can add people to the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039; — find and see all your shared files, photos, links and whiteboard content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Schedule&#039;&#039; — create a meeting from the space or get a list of meetings already scheduled for the space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Call/Meet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Audio&#039;&#039; — make an audio call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Video&#039;&#039; — make a video call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Application Update Available&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Update-Icon.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex App will periodically prompt for an update by showing an icon in the sidebar. Click the green circle icon to relaunch Webex and install the newest application version.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio Calling ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Telephone  Phone --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Place an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
To place an audio call, navigate to the &#039;&#039;&#039;calling tab&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-calltab.png|500px|none|webex app - calling tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
From here you can dial a number or search directory to make call.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can view your call history in the left pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Answer an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving a call, you will receive a desktop notification in the lower right hand corner of the screen with buttons that give you options to answer, decline, or send a message to the caller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Incomingnotif.png|400px|none|Webex App - Incoming Call]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application will also ring. Ring settings can be adjusted under Audio Preferences, located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Audio.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Ringer-Settings.png|400px|none|Webex App - Ringer Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are looking to purchase a headset, we suggest the Poly Plantronics Blackwire 3225 USB-C as a reliable device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
To view and manage call settings, click on “Call Settings” bottom left of UI, dialog box will open (see below).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-CallSettings.png|500px|none|Webex App - Quick Call Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helpful settings available here include: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Forward Calls to Voicemail or another registered number (see next section on adding numbers) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a registered phone for “Single Number Reach” - this will allow incoming calls to ring on both your desktop app and the selected phone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Preferences ====&lt;br /&gt;
Call preferences can be located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Calling&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call pref2.png|400px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to start calls with your video enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to forward calls to VM or another number, add forwarding numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add phone number for Single Number Reach, and enable/disable for numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Voicemail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting Voicemail Pin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A voicemail pin will be required to access voicemail and change voicemail settings. This process is also to be used if user forgets or is locked out of their voicemail. The pin &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be set by the user. To set your voicemail pin:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP1.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
Some voicemail settings are only available through the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; section of the Settings Portal. This portal can be accessed here: https://settings.webex.com by signing in with you University credentials, then following the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; link from the top menu (this will open a new page). On this page click &#039;Voicemail Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default voicemail settings are as follows. These settings can be changed if desired:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When busy, send calls to voicemail.&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer after 3 rings.&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:CiscoWebex-DefaultVMSettings.png|550px|frame|none|Default Voicemail Settings]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Additional Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail to Email&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice messages sent to email by entering their email address in the Settings Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail Text Notification&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice message notifications sent by text by entering their phone number and selecting their provider in the Settings Portal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-VMtoEmail.png|500px|frame|none|Voicemail to Email and Text Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information on voicemail settings see [https://callinghelp.webex.com/eu_voicemail/ Voicemail Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Phone Access - Voice Portal ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voicemail can be access through the Voice Portal by dialing: 973-720-3451. You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* Mailbox ID (last 4 digits of extension and # symbol)&lt;br /&gt;
* Voicemail Pin and # symbol (set through the web portal, see Setting Voicemail Pin section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Greetings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|unEXDB05xBU|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to record your personalized name and No Answer greeting through the Voice Portal. Below is the phone menu tree for reference:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Menu-Tree.png|700px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Webex Mobile Apps ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installing the Webex Mobile App allows for your mobile device to be notified when someone calls you through Webex. Calls made to Webex extensions will ring the Webex App and notify you with a &amp;quot;ring&amp;quot; that can be answered on your device. The Webex App also allows you to place calls from your mobile device and can be downloaded from either the Apple App Store or Google Play Store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== iOS ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/cisco-webex/id833967564 Apple App Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AppleApp.PNG|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.cisco.wx2.android Google Play Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AndroidApp.jpg|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|LxZzrSEBKYs|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cisco Phone ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cisco 8841 Guide Page 3.jpg|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Webex#Cisco_8841_Office_Phone_Overview|Please visit the Cisco 8841 Phone Overview section for more information about the Cisco 8841 Phones as well as a PDF with additional information]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12422</id>
		<title>Phone and Voicemail System</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=Phone_and_Voicemail_System&amp;diff=12422"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:37:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#FF8C00&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This article provides information on utilizing Cisco Webex Calling and Voicemail.  If you are looking for instructions for [[Voicemail|the existing Avaya Voicemail system please see our previous  documentation.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information Technology is responsible for the design implementation and management of the University’s voice systems consisting of the Cisco Webex Calling, end user instruments and supporting peripherals, inclusive of messaging, call and invoice management systems, automated operator and directory services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Here are some helpful links with detailed instructions pertaining to the Phone and Voicemail System:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is Webex? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Webex is Cisco’s video and phone conferencing platform.  It allows individuals to make, receive, and schedule phone calls, video calls, and conferences from any device.  Webex meetings are highly immersive, providing HD video, wireless content sharing and much more. Webex Meetings and Events can have up to 1000 participants. Webex meeting would be more collaborative whereas Webex events are more ideal for presentations and a larger audience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changes to Webex - 2021 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important information about changes to Webex at WPUNJ:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A Unified WebEx App&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By years end, the current WebEx Teams app and WebEx Meetings app will be fully replaced by a single app simply called WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For now, WebEx Meetings will stay in place and anyone with Web Teams should automatically be upgraded to WebEx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;WebEx Calling in Trial&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We are  currently testing WebEx calling in limited trial testing.   WebEx calling turns the WebEx application into a fully featured phone experience, using your WPU extension either on or off campus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For specific information about the calling testing, or if you have questions and concerns, please contact the [https://help.wpunj.edu/ HelpDesk].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using the Webex App (Desktop) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Installation ===&lt;br /&gt;
The full application is available through the [https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php/University_Software Software Center] on University imaged machines. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
For personal machines, go to https://www.webex.com/downloads.html to install full application for your platform.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After installing, you will need to sign in to the application:&lt;br /&gt;
#Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Sign in&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your &#039;&#039;&#039;full WPU email address&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Sign in again with &#039;&#039;&#039;WPU login&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duo authentication&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upon initial login, you may encounter ‘Phone service disconnected’ message – to resolve click the message, then click ‘New Session’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call error3.png|350px|frame|none|service disconnected error]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Interface Overview ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebexUI 1.png|750px|none|Webex App User Interface]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;On Windows and Mac, you&#039;ll see Help  at the bottom of your spaces list, which links you to Cisco help documentation.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Your group work takes place in spaces, either in groups or in direct messages with another person. They display prominently so you can get to them whenever you need to. Your most recently active spaces are at the top. If anyone has added you to a new team or space, you&#039;ll see it here too. When someone&#039;s posted a new message in the space, you&#039;ll see the bolded space name.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Navigation Menu&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Switch easily among your message, team, call, and meeting views. Messages appear by default, but your teams, calls, and meetings are just a click away. When you have unread messages in your spaces or teams, you&#039;ll see counters next to Messaging  and Teams .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Profile and Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click your profile to update your picture or name, access your settings and preferences, and set your availability. If you have some important work to finish or are on a call, let people know that you don&#039;t want to be disturbed: whether that&#039;s for a few minutes or an entire day is up to you.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header click Set a status , select a status from the list or create and share any status you want, so your colleagues know what you&#039;re up to.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Search&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, just click  Search, meet, and call to search through the history of your conversations to find people you&#039;re talking to, spaces you&#039;re in, messages you received, and files you need.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Filters&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click  to see the available filters. Then, select a filter to show just the messages or spaces you want to see.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Start a Conversation, Make a Call, or Add a Contact&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header, click , and select Send a direct message to create a direct message space between you and just one other person, or select Create a Space to start a group conversation. You can also select Make a call , or select Add a contact.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Devices&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In the app header on Windows and Mac, you can connect automatically with Webex devices from the Connect to a Device menu. When connected, you can share your screen, start a call, or open a space (on Webex Board). You can also connect to your desk phone from the menu to make calls and join meetings. If you have a lot of devices close by, you can set certain devices to not automatically connect.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Activities&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Whenever you&#039;re in a space, click the activity menu tabs to get access to all the different activities you can do:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Messages&#039;&#039; — Messages are where you chat with colleagues. We keep these messages secure so you can feel confident sharing your work ideas in Webex.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;People&#039;&#039; — see who&#039;s in the space, or if you&#039;re a moderator you can add people to the space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Content&#039;&#039; — find and see all your shared files, photos, links and whiteboard content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Schedule&#039;&#039; — create a meeting from the space or get a list of meetings already scheduled for the space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Call/Meet&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Audio&#039;&#039; — make an audio call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Video&#039;&#039; — make a video call to a person or to people in a Space.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Application Update Available&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:700px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Update-Icon.png|thumb|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex App will periodically prompt for an update by showing an icon in the sidebar. Click the green circle icon to relaunch Webex and install the newest application version.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Audio Calling ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Telephone  Phone --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==== Place an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
To place an audio call, navigate to the &#039;&#039;&#039;calling tab&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-calltab.png|500px|none|webex app - calling tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
From here you can dial a number or search directory to make call.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can view your call history in the left pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Answer an Audio Call ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving a call, you will receive a desktop notification in the lower right hand corner of the screen with buttons that give you options to answer, decline, or send a message to the caller:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Incomingnotif.png|400px|none|Webex App - Incoming Call]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The application will also ring. Ring settings can be adjusted under Audio Preferences, located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; &amp;gt; &amp;quot;Audio.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Ringer-Settings.png|400px|none|Webex App - Ringer Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are looking to purchase a headset, we suggest the Poly Plantronics Blackwire 3225 USB-C as a reliable device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
To view and manage call settings, click on “Call Settings” bottom left of UI, dialog box will open (see below).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-CallSettings.png|500px|none|Webex App - Quick Call Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Helpful settings available here include: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Forward Calls to Voicemail or another registered number (see next section on adding numbers) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select a registered phone for “Single Number Reach” - this will allow incoming calls to ring on both your desktop app and the selected phone&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio Call Preferences ====&lt;br /&gt;
Call preferences can be located under your account menu in the upper left hand corner of the application and clicking &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Calling&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Call pref2.png|400px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to start calls with your video enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose whether to forward calls to VM or another number, add forwarding numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Add phone number for Single Number Reach, and enable/disable for numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Voicemail ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|e0qpRz4BWMA|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Setting Voicemail Pin ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A voicemail pin will be required to access voicemail and change voicemail settings. This process is also to be used if user forgets or is locked out of their voicemail. The pin &#039;&#039;&#039;must&#039;&#039;&#039; be set by the user. To set your voicemail pin:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Settings ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP1.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
===== Default Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
Some voicemail settings are only available through the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; section of the Settings Portal. This portal can be accessed here: https://settings.webex.com by signing in with you University credentials, then following the &#039;Webex Calling&#039; link from the top menu (this will open a new page). On this page click &#039;Voicemail Settings&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default voicemail settings are as follows. These settings can be changed if desired:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* When busy, send calls to voicemail.&lt;br /&gt;
* Answer after 3 rings.&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[File:CiscoWebex-DefaultVMSettings.png|550px|frame|none|Default Voicemail Settings]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Additional Settings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail to Email&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice messages sent to email by entering their email address in the Settings Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Voicemail Text Notification&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose to have voice message notifications sent by text by entering their phone number and selecting their provider in the Settings Portal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-VMtoEmail.png|500px|frame|none|Voicemail to Email and Text Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further information on voicemail settings see [https://callinghelp.webex.com/eu_voicemail/ Voicemail Guide]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voicemail Phone Access - Voice Portal ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voicemail can be access through the Voice Portal by dialing: 973-720-3451. You will be prompted to enter:&lt;br /&gt;
* Mailbox ID (last 4 digits of extension and # symbol)&lt;br /&gt;
* Voicemail Pin and # symbol (set through the web portal, see Setting Voicemail Pin section above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Greetings =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|unEXDB05xBU|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to record your personalized name and No Answer greeting through the Voice Portal. Below is the phone menu tree for reference:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-Menu-Tree.png|700px|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Webex Mobile Apps ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installing the Webex Mobile App allows for your mobile device to be notified when someone calls you through Webex. Calls made to Webex extensions will ring the Webex App and notify you with a &amp;quot;ring&amp;quot; that can be answered on your device. The Webex App also allows you to place calls from your mobile device and can be downloaded from either the Apple App Store or Google Play Store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== iOS ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://apps.apple.com/us/app/cisco-webex/id833967564 Apple App Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AppleApp.PNG|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Android ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Cisco Webex mobile app is available in the [https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.cisco.wx2.android Google Play Store]. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is not to be confused with the Cisco Webex Meetings app that will be depreciated moving forward.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CiscoWebex-AndroidApp.jpg|450px|none|Cisco Webex Apple App Store]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Login with your University credentials after install.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Additional Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:youtube|LxZzrSEBKYs|600}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cisco Phone ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cisco 8841 Guide Page 3.jpg|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Webex#Cisco_8841_Office_Phone_Overview|Please visit the Cisco 8841 Phone Overview section for more information about the Cisco 8841 Phones as well as a PDF with additional information]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg&amp;diff=12421</id>
		<title>File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP3.1JPG.jpg&amp;diff=12421"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:37:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Directions page 3&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP3.jpg&amp;diff=12420</id>
		<title>File:VMP3.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP3.jpg&amp;diff=12420"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:35:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Directions Pg 3&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP2.jpg&amp;diff=12419</id>
		<title>File:VMP2.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP2.jpg&amp;diff=12419"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:35:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Directions pg 2&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP1.jpg&amp;diff=12418</id>
		<title>File:VMP1.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VMP1.jpg&amp;diff=12418"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:34:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Directions Pg 1&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VP2.jpg&amp;diff=12417</id>
		<title>File:VP2.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VP2.jpg&amp;diff=12417"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:27:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Calling location&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VP1.jpg&amp;diff=12415</id>
		<title>File:VP1.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:VP1.jpg&amp;diff=12415"/>
		<updated>2024-06-18T14:25:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Settings Location&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12131</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12131"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T02:21:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: Blanked the page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12130</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12130"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:38:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For permission you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the &amp;quot;Extended&amp;quot; tab. Once the page populates select the check box &amp;quot;Allow License Plate Passage&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
13.) Remember to press &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; on the upper tool bar. Now access to the garage has been completed for the patron. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK26.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12129</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12129"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:36:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the &amp;quot;Extended&amp;quot; tab. Once the page populates select the check box &amp;quot;Allow License Plate Passage&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
13.) Remember to press &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; on the upper tool bar. Now access to the garage has been completed for the patron. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK26.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12128</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12128"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:33:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the &amp;quot;Extended&amp;quot; tab. Once the page populates select the check box &amp;quot;Allow License Plate Passage&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
13.) Remember to press &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; on the upper tool bar. Now access to the garage has been completed for the patron. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK26.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12127</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12127"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:32:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the &amp;quot;Extended&amp;quot; tab. Once the page populates select the check box &amp;quot;Allow License Plate Passage&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
13.) Remember to press save. Now access to the garage has been completed for the patron. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK26.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12126</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12126"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:31:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the &amp;quot;Extended&amp;quot; tab. Once the page populates select the check box &amp;quot;Allow License Plate Passage&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
13.) Remember to press save. Now access to the garage has been completed for the patron. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK26.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK26.jpg&amp;diff=12125</id>
		<title>File:SK26.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK26.jpg&amp;diff=12125"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:31:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Allow License Plate Passage check box.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12124</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12124"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:27:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the Extended tab. Once the page populates select the check box &amp;quot;Allow License Plate Passage&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
13.) Remember to press save. Now access to the garage has been completed for the patron. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12123</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12123"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:24:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the Extended tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12122</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12122"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:23:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12.) Now that you are back to the entry page select the Extended tab.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK25.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK25.jpg&amp;diff=12121</id>
		<title>File:SK25.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK25.jpg&amp;diff=12121"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:23:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Extended tab location.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12120</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12120"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:17:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12119</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12119"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:16:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12118</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12118"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:15:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12117</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12117"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:15:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save from the top tool bar.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10.) Next you will select the License plate icon in the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK23.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11.) Once the page is loaded you will enter the license plate in the &amp;quot;License Pl&amp;quot; field. Nothing else needs to be filled out in this section. Hit the OK button at the bottom of the page. Now select &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK24.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK24.jpg&amp;diff=12116</id>
		<title>File:SK24.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK24.jpg&amp;diff=12116"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:14:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;License Plate Entry Page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK23.jpg&amp;diff=12115</id>
		<title>File:SK23.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK23.jpg&amp;diff=12115"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:11:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;License Plate icon i n the top tool bar.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12114</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12114"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:07:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select &amp;quot;Contr Parker&amp;quot;, and then select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8.) Once the new page populated select the &amp;quot;Card&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.) In the articles pull down tab be sure to select &amp;quot;WPU GARAGE ACCESS&amp;quot;. Then go to the top of the page and select Save.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK22.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In this tab you can also set the length of access privilege. By default it is set to 1 year.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK22.jpg&amp;diff=12113</id>
		<title>File:SK22.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK22.jpg&amp;diff=12113"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:07:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Card tab, and Articles pull down menu.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12112</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12112"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:01:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select Contr Parker, and then select New from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12111</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12111"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:00:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select Contr Parker, and then select New from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12110</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12110"/>
		<updated>2023-12-07T00:00:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.) Next step is to click on the menu tab on the right side of the box and select Contr Parker, and then select New from the pop-up menu.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK21.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK21.jpg&amp;diff=12109</id>
		<title>File:SK21.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK21.jpg&amp;diff=12109"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T23:59:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Contr Parker, and New tab from menu.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12108</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12108"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T23:08:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12107</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12107"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T23:07:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.) Hit the save button. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK20.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK20.jpg&amp;diff=12106</id>
		<title>File:SK20.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK20.jpg&amp;diff=12106"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T23:06:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Save icon, top tool bar.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12105</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12105"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T23:01:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12104</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12104"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T23:00:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.) Now add the customers Surname and first name in the appropriate box. The ID Tag will be your last name and the date. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK19.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK19.jpg&amp;diff=12103</id>
		<title>File:SK19.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK19.jpg&amp;diff=12103"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T23:00:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Name Boxes- Surname / First Name location.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12102</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12102"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:52:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12101</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12101"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:49:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK18.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12100</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12100"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:45:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.) Next you want to select the &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; icon from the top tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK18.jpg&amp;diff=12099</id>
		<title>File:SK18.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK18.jpg&amp;diff=12099"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:44:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The New icon on the top tool bar.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12098</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12098"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:38:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Parking Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.) From the top tool bar select the &amp;quot;Users&amp;quot; tab looks like a black Silhouette.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK17.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK17.jpg&amp;diff=12097</id>
		<title>File:SK17.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK17.jpg&amp;diff=12097"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:38:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Users tab&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12096</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12096"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:08:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Park Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12095</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12095"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:04:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Park Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#1 From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
#2 After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#  [[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12094</id>
		<title>User:Millingm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=User:Millingm&amp;diff=12094"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:03:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[]]&lt;br /&gt;
== &#039;&#039;&#039;Skidata&#039;&#039;&#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Web Client - SWEB Portal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This program is used for remote access to control access functions for the Pioneer Parking Deck. For adding customer Parking permissions, you will need to use the Skidata Park Logic Server program. Information regarding that program is below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Logging In&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
To access SWEB Portal open a browser and type in the following address: https://hb.usa.skidata.com/portal/?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get Login Name and Password you must submit request to: millingm@wpunj.edu&lt;br /&gt;
              Tenant = US_WilliamPaterson&lt;br /&gt;
              Note: Login name IS case sensitive&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK2.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged into the SWEB Portal as pictured you will go to the menu tab in the upper left corner (This is identified by the box with 3 lines). Once tab is clicked on there will be two options present SWEB CONTROL and PORTAL ADMINISTRATION on the left column. To view and control the various access points you will want to select SWEB CONTROL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK3.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;SWEB CONTROL&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the SWEB CONTROL loads you will be presented with the following screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK4.png|thumb]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Monitoring tab from the left hand column, and a drop down will appear with a tab labeled Sweb Control. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK5.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK6.png|thumb]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you Select Sweb Control you will be presented with the Infrastructure page as pictured here. This comprises of the various modules and operable gates, the Health State of the system, etc.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Operate A Gate ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To operate a gate via the system you will click on the desired entrance or exit gate from the Filter by name column on the left. A gate is identified by the symbol pictured here:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK7.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you selected the desired gate, the gate tab will highlight yellow in the left column, and a set of Commands will appear on the right pictured here.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK8.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In that Column you will want to select the tab at the bottom of the right hand column that says SHOW ALL 18 COMMANDS.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK9.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Understanding The Commands:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Automatic open – This selection means that the gate will automatically open after a momentary pause      upon a vehicles arrival. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Locked – This will trigger a full closure of the gate. No vehicles can enter or exit from this access gate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep Open – This will leave the gate fully up at all times allowing vehicles to move freely in and out with no obstruction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Manual Open – This is a onetime opening performed by the remote operator.  This is to be used when a patron at the gate needs access or exit but doesn’t have the required credential or an operational mishap not allowing patron to enter or exit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Performing a command:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When performing a command select the desired command (For Example Automatic Open) It will ask for an explanation as to why this action is being performed. The reason could be there is a football game. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Following the explanation you would select Execute to send the command to the intended gate. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK10.png|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Parking Logic- Server Control / Admin Program ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once permission is given, and the program is installed/ setup on your PC you will go to the login page, and login.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK11.png.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the main desktop page you can select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the page, or you can select all programs from the left side menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Access Point Control&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Control the access points you select the Control Center tab at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK12.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the Control page comes up it will show the various control systems and access gates available on your system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an access gate (indicated by the gate arm Icon). It will highlight Yellow indicating it was selected. From there you can scroll over the top bar of commands and names will appear on the icons explaining their function. For example Manually Open, Keep Open On, Keep Open Off, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK13.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK14.jpg|thumb]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Adding License Plates Individually To Parking Logic&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# From the Parking Logic Home screen you want to select from the left hand menu with the box that says &amp;quot;All Programs&amp;quot; Then from the drop down menu choose &amp;quot;Customers&amp;quot; and then select &amp;quot;Customer Admin&amp;quot; from the box.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SK15.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# After the Customer Admin page loads you will see a menu box labeled &amp;quot;Customer List&amp;quot; select &amp;quot;WPU Manual adds&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:SK16.jpg|thumb]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK16.jpg&amp;diff=12093</id>
		<title>File:SK16.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://itwiki.wpunj.edu/index.php?title=File:SK16.jpg&amp;diff=12093"/>
		<updated>2023-12-06T22:02:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Millingm: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Customer List / WPU Manual Add&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Millingm</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>